LG F2400 Owner's manual

Add to my manuals
220 Pages

advertisement

LG F2400 Owner's manual | Manualzz
Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone
depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.
MMBB0163211 (1.1)
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪8 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ‪34 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ‪9 ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪34 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪12 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪34 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪12 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ‪35 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪15 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪36 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ‪17 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪36 .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪17 .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ ‪36 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪19 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ‪36 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪20 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ ‪37 ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪20 .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪37 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ‪20 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪37 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪21 ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪37 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪37 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪22 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪38 .................................................................... GPRS‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪22 .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪38 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪26 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪38 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪27 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮﺍﺕ ‪28 .................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺡ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪39 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ‪39 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪30 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪39 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪33 ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪39 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪39 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪45 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪39 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪45 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪39 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪45 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪40 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ‪45 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪40 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪45 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪40 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪46 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪40 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪46 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪40 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪46 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ ‪41 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪47 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ‪41 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪48 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ‪41 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ‪49 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪41 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ‪50 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ‪42 .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ ‪50 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪42 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪50 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪42 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪51 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪43 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪51 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪43 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪51 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪44 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪51 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ ‪44 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪52 ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪45 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ‪52 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪45 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪52 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ‪52 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪58 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪53 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪58 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪53 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪58 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪53 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪58 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ‪54 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪58 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪58 ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪55 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪58 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪55 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪59 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﻤﺎﻁ ‪56 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪59 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ‪56 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ‪59 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪56 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ‪60 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪56 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪60 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ‪56 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪60 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪56 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪61 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ‪61 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪57 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪61 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ‪57 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪57 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪61 ......................................................................... PIN‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ‪57 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪61 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪57 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ‪61 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪62 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪58 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪62 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ‪58 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪62 ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺁﻟﻲ ‪62 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ‪69 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪63 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪70 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻀﻞ ‪63 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪70 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ‪63 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪70 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪63 ...................................................................... GPRS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪71 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪64 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ‪72 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪64 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪64 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ‪65 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ‪65 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪67 ........................................................................ URL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ‪67 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪67 ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪67 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ‪67 ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪67 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪68 ...................................................................... SIM‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ ‪69 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ‪69 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ F2400‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ )‪(SAR‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ F2400‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﺤﺘﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪ .SAR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) SAR‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪) SAR‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ( ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ‪ SAR‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻮﻧﻲ )‪ (ICNIPR‬ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ )‪ (10‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ‪ SAR‬ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ DASY3‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ‪1.3‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺟﺮﺍﻡ )‪ 10‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻓﻨﻴﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ)ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺩﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻐﻨﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﻼ ﺩﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ( ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻌﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻐﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺠﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺨﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻀﻌﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﺗﺸﻮﺵ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻦ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﻟﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺃﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫• ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺔﻳﺭﺎﻄﺒﻟﺍ ءﺎﻄﻏ‬
‫ﻡﺍﺰﺤﻟ ﺕﺎﺤﺘﻓ‬
‫ﻞﻤﺤﻟﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﺔﻳﺭﺎﻄﺒﻟﺍ ﺔﻋﻮﻤﺠﻣ‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ .10 ,2‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎ‪a‬ﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .13‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.14‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪..‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .12‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .13‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .14‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪:‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ “‪.”+‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺣﺎ ﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﻮﺍﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.GPRS‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.WAP‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GPRS‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ؛ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪،SIM‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﻰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ • ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺄﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻳﻰء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ )ﻣﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ “ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ” ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻲء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪،PIN code‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪.PIN‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PUK‬ﻭ ‪ (PUK2‬ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .[7-5-5-‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.62‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪) PIN‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PUK2‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PIN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻚ ‪ SIM‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PIN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ،PUK2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ ،SIM‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ PUK2‬ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PIN2‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ،PIN2‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ ،SIM‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PUK‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PUK‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﻊ ‪ (PIN‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺗﻢ ﻣﻨﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PUK‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎً‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ “‪ ”0000‬ﻭﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎً ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.61‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ”‪ “+‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ )‬
‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )‬
‫( ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫( ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء )‬
‫( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‬
‫( ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺑﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫( ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ )‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺎً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪) .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪] 60‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(.[7-4-2‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(60‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫◄ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻭﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺠﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ‪T9‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ T9‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ )ﺃ‬
‫ﺏ ﺝ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎً ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) ABC‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) 123‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﺎﻴﺧ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪T9‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ T9‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ ‪ T9‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪.‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪.Good‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.Home‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ‪.ABC‬‬
‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .T9‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ ،T9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪T9‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،T9‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) ABC‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬‫ ﺿﻐﻄﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬‫ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬‫‪ .2‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫؛‪. 1 ! ، :‬‬
‫ﺏﺕﺓﺙ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺃﺇﺁﻯﺅﺉء‪3‬‬
‫ﺱﺵﺹﺽ‪4‬‬
‫ﺩﺫﺭﺯ‪5‬‬
‫ﺝﺡﺥ‪6‬‬
‫ﻥﻩﻭﻯ‪7‬‬
‫ﻑﻕﻙﻝﻡ‪8‬‬
‫ﻁﻅﻉﻍ‪9‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪0 ،‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) 123‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ .SIM‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 200‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫)ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(48-45‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﻙ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ” ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ [ 4-4-7‬ﻓﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.60‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫”ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ”ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻭﺭﺩ“‬
‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ[‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺭﻓﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪) DTMF‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ DTMF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ .DTMF on‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ DTMF‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ DTMF‬ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺣﺪﺍﻫﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ )ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫(‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ )‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ “ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ‪ /‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ”‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ “ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ‪ /‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ”‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 34‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻣﺮﺡ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 39‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 36‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 41‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 46‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 58‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 55‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 64‬‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 69‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫( ﻭ)‬
‫)‬
‫( ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ‪“ :‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ” ﻭ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ” ﻭ”ﻋﺎﻡ”‬
‫ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭ”ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ” ﻭ”ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ”‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫“ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ” ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-×-1‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ”‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ”‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-×-1‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ”‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫◄ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫◄ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬
‫◄ ﺭﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺣﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-×-1‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ “ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ” ﻭ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ”‬
‫ﻭ”ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ”‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ” ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ” ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )‪ (CLI‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻢ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-2‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-2‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫• ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ )ﺳﻮﺍء ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ(‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫• ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫• ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-2‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-2‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ “ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ”‬
‫ﻭ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ”‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-5-2‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫◄ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎﺕ‬
‫]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-5-2‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺳﻴُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN2‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-5-2‬‬
‫)ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SIM‬‬
‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN2‬‬
‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6-2‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪.GPRS‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-6-2‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-6-2‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺡ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-3‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-1-3‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-1-3‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-1-3‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ,‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-3‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ %,×,-,+‬ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء “ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ” ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﺭﺟﻮﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-3‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫]ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺡ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-3‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-3‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﺣﻔﻆ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-5-3‬‬
‫)ﺗﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-5-3‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6-3‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-4‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-1-4‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺑﺤﺚ” ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻷﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪,‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ‪/‬ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬
‫◄ ﻧﺴﺦ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ :‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻚ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-1-4‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 200‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ 20‬ﺣﺮﻓﺎً ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﺎً ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪ .a‬ﺃ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬
‫‪ .b‬ﺏ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ .c‬ﺝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .d‬ﺩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-1-4‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪ .e‬ﻫـ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪. ,‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-1-4‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻀﻮﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ‪ 7‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ >ﻓﺎﺭﻍ<‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-1-4‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻀﻮﺍً‪.‬‬
‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻀﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻳﻈﻼﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫◄ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬‫ﺣﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ :‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6-1-4‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪ /‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻓﺎﺗﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ :SIM‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﻞ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7-1-4‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ “ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ”‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺭﺟﻮﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8-1-4‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫◄ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(SIM‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫◄ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(SIM‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﻣﻮﺯ )ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻳﺖ ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺎً ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ Description‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻨﻮﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻬﺮﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-2-4‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫“ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ” ﻭ”ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ” ﻭ”ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ”‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-2-4‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ ,‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-2-4‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-2-4‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-4‬‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-4‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻼﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-2-4‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Messages‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ(‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-1-5‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫)‪.(SMS‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ‪SMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬
‫“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬
‫“ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Inbox‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ( ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SMS‬ﻟﻢ ﺗُﺴﺘﻠﻢ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺃﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .23‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪) 26‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ(‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫]‪) [Options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ )ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ‪ :T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫◄ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ .T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ T9‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ “‪) ”T9 off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ .(T9‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪T9‬‬
‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]‪) [Attach‬ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ “ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ”‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-1-5‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺺ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]‪) [Done‬ﺗﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]‪[Select‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]‪) [Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]‪) [Menu‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫◄ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻘﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ‪ :T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻱ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ .T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ T9‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ “‪) ”T9 off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ .(T9‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ[‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-5‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺮﻭء‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺮﻭء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﻼء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫◄ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺍﺳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-5‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤًﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺇﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-5‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-5‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6-5‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ .GSM‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺪﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-6-5‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-6-5‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫]‪) [Options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Add new‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]‪) [Options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7-5‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-7-5‬‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﺮﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﺄﻛﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ‪...‬‬
‫• ﺃﻳﻦ ﺃﻧﺖ؟‬
‫• ﺃﻧﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﺎ ﺃﺣﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫◄ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-7-5‬‬
‫◄ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ‪ :T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ :T9‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.T9‬‬
‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-7-5‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8-5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-8-5‬‬
‫◄ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻭ‪ X 400‬ﻭﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭ ‪ERMES‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﺒﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫◄ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ :SMS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ SMS‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-8-5‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺴﻠﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺴﻠﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﻠﻢ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ URL‬ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪ :‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﻼﻥ‪ :‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-8-5‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-8-5‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ‪ :‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﻻ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-8-5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ‪ٍ 5‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ‪ٍ 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-6‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ]‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ]‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ” ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﻰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫◄ ﻧﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (480×640‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )‪ (240×320‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)‪ (160×128‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )‪.(96×96‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫◄ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫◄ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ]‬
‫‪ ×1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ً ×5‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ]‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ‪ 2- :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1-‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1+‬ﺃﻭ ‪2+‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫• ﻛﺸﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ،320 × 240‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻮﻯ ‪ 6‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ،128 × 160‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ 9‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ 9‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-4-6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-4-6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-4-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 9‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪.MMS‬‬
‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻮﺭﻕ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-5-6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-4-6‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-5-6‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-5-6‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻮﺭﻕ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ :‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫‪ /‬ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-7‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-7‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-3-7‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-2-7‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-2-7‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ – ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ – ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-2-7‬‬
‫ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-2-7‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻻﻣﻊ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-3-7‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-4-7‬‬
‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺸﻐﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻻ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-4-7‬‬
‫◄ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫]ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-4-7‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ(‬
‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬
‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-4-7‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪I :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-4-7‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6-4-7‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-5-7‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺍً‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PUK‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PUK 10‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PUK‬ﻋﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-5-7‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-5-7‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺤﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫◄ ﺩﻭﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-5-7‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ PIN‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ،PIN2‬ﻓﺄﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN2‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-5-7‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(SIM‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN2‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6-7‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-6-7‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ “ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ”‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫“ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ” ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-6-7‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺗﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-6-7‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7-7‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8-7‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ GPRS‬ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎً‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.WAP‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺐ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪WAP‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪.WAP‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ,‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪.‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪.‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪WAP‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪ WAP‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-1-8‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-1-8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪ URL‬ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ” ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫“ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﺨﺪ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎ “‬
‫” ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎ “‬
‫” ﻹ ﺧﺎ ﻟﺮﻣﻮ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-1-8‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )‪(URL‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺪء‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺔ ‪ //:http‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪GPRS 2‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﻛﺤﺎﻣﻞ ‪ /‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ :IP‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪(WAP‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ (WAP‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(ISDN‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ 9600 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪14000‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ WAP‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ :GPRS‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ GPRS‬ﻛﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ :IP‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :APN‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪ APN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺏ‪.GPRS‬‬
‫ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ‪ APN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ )ﺑﻼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻛﺪﺓ‪..‬‬
‫‪HTTP‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪HTTP .‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ : IP‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪DNS‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ‪ DNS‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ ‪ DNS‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ APN‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﻭﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﺆﻛﺪﺓ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺯﺩﺣﺎﻣﺎً ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻃﻠﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪URL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-1-8‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪URL‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-1-8‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻃﻠﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6-1-8‬‬
‫“ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ”‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫“ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ”‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7-1-8‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8-1-8‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪9-1-8‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ‪.WAP‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-8‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻛﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻳﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪9‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-9‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-1-9‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻯ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ‪ ،Java‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫( ﻟﺘﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ‬
‫◄ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪..‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ً‬‫ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪Sun‬‬
‫‪ Microsystems‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪Java‬‬
‫‪ Applet‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ‪ Netscape‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪MS‬‬
‫‪ .Internet Explorer‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ Java MIDlet‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ .WAP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ‪ Java‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ JAD‬ﻭ‪.JAR‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ JAR‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ً JAD‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎ ﻭﺻﻔﻴًﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭﺻﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.JAD‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ )‪(J2ME‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻢ “ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ” ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪J2ME (Java 2‬‬
‫‪ (Micro Edition‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(J2ME(Java 2 Micro Edition‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-1-9‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.WAP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-9‬‬
‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻮﺭﻕ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.MMS‬‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-9‬‬
‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﺅﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ‪ SMS‬ﺃﻭ ‪.MMS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺒﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ “ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ”‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺫﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺳﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻙ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪F2400 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 :‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪C°55+ :‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪C°10- :‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪ -‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ‪8 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ‪35 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ‪9 .......................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪35 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪13 .................................................................. F2400‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ‪35 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪13 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ‪36 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪16 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪37 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪18 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ ‪37 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪18 ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ‪37 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪20 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪37 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪21 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ‪38 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ‪21 ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪38 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ‪22 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪38 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ‪22 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪38 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪38 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ‪23 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪39 ...................................................................... GPRS‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ‪23 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪39 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ‪27 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪39 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪28 ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ‪29 .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ‪40 ......................................................................‬‬
‫‪40 ......................................................................... Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ ‪31 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﻣﻦ ‪40 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪34 ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ‪40 .................................................................‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪40 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪46 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪40 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ‪47 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪41 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ ‪47 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ‪41 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪47 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪41 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪41 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ‪48 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪41 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪48 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪41 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ‪48 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ‪49 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ‪42 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ‪50 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪42 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ‪52 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ‪42 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ‪52 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪42 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪53 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ‪43 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ‪53 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪43 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ‪53 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪44 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪53 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪44 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ‪54 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ ‪45 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ‪54 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪45 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ‪54 ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ‪46 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻀﺎ ‪55 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪46 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪55 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪46 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ‪55 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ‪55 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪60 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪56 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪60 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪56 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ‪60 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪56 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪60 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪60 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪57 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪60 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪57 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪61 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭ ‪58 .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪61 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ‪58 .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪61 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻋﻜﺲ ‪58 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ‪62 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ‪58 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ ‪62 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ‪58 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪63 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ‪59 ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﻕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ‪63 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪59 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪63 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪59 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ‪63 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪59 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺪ ‪63 .................................................................. PIN‬‬
‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ‪59 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪63 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ‪59 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪64 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪64 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪60 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﺪ ‪64 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪60 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪65 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪60 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪65 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪65 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ‪72 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ‪65 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪72 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪65 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ‪72 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪65 ......................................................................... GPRS‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ‪73 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪66 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ‪74 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪67 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪67 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ‪67 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ‪67 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪69 ........................................................................ URL‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ‪69 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﻫﺎ ‪69 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭک ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ‪70 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ‪70 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ‪70 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪70 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ‪71 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ‪71 ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ‪71 .............................................................‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻝ‪.‬ﺟﯽ‬
‫‪ F2400‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ )‪(SAR‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ F١٢٠٠‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎی ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻳﺎ‪ SAR‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ‪ SAR‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ‪ SAR‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ‪ SAR‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺰﻩ )‪ (ICNIRP‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻩ )‪ (١٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ‪ SAR‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ‪ ١٫٣‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ )‪ ١٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪DASY۴‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﻓﺎژ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺁﺷﭙﺰی ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮﻙ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫• ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻔﺎﻑ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﻴﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺗﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺐ‬
‫)‪ (pace maker‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺐ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﻌﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪﺍی ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﯽﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺎﺭﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺮژی ‪ RF‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﺴﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺷﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪی ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮگ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭی‬
‫ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺿﺮﻭﺭی‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺳﻠﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﻜﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺘﻌﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫• ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫• ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﯽﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺍﻝﺟﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝﻫﺎی ﻓﻠﺰی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪F2400‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﺪﻓﻰ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻃﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﮔﻮﺷﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﻰ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪F2400‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﭘﺸﺖ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ /‬ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪F2400‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ .١٠ ,٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪ /‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﻭ ﺑﻰ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﻰ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﯽ‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ .١۴‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻰ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻰ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻧﮕﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺸﯽ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪F2400‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻰ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١۴‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻰ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻰ “‪ ”+‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻰ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPRS‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪F2400‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻛﻠﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﺑﻪ ‪WAP‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪GPRS‬‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﻰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﺳﺎﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻃﻼﻳﻰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﻯ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻠﺰﻯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﻴﺪﮔﻰ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﻳﻰ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ )ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺩﺍﺑﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ • ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ • ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻴﺶ ﺁﺩﺍﺑﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﺩﺍﺑﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﻮﻙ ﺗﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺧﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ “ﭘﺮ”‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺪ ‪ PIN‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ‪PIN‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ • ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ)ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ PUK‬ﻭ ‪ (PUK٢‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ ۵-۵-٧-‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۶۴‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺪ ‪ ۴) PIN‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ(‬
‫)‪ PIN(Personal Identification Number‬ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ ٬‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺪ‬
‫‪ PIN‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ٬‬ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻛﺪ ‪ PIN‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ ‪ PIN‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺪ ‪ ۴) PIN2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ‪ PIN٢‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻴﻜﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺪ ‪ ۴) PUK‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ(‬
‫ﻛﺪ ‪) PUK‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ‪ (PIN‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ‬
‫‪ PIN‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺪ ‪ PUK‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺪ ‪ ۴) PUK2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ(‬
‫ﻛﺪ ‪ PUK٢٬‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ‪ PUK٢‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ )‪ ۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ(‬
‫ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ”‪ “٠٠٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ٬‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪ Call barring‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ )‪ (Call barring‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۶۴‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ +‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻬﺎی‪ ٬‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪٬‬‬
‫( ﻛﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ )‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )‬
‫( ﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨﺎً ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ٬‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺪ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻬﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪی ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪( ) .‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪ ٬‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻛﻨﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪی ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﻴﺰﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ٬‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻟﺮ ﺁی ﺩی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫]ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ [٢-۴-٧-‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪(.۶٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (۶٢‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪ ٬‬ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻛﻨﺎﺭی ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻧﮓ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ )ﺁﻧﺘﻦ(‬
‫( ﺭﻭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ )‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ LCD‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪٬‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪T٩‬‬
‫ﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‪ ٬‬ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ T٩ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ‪ ABC‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻤﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﮔﺎﻫﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ABC‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻫﺎﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‪ ٬‬ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ٬‬ﺳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) ١٢٣‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺪﺩی(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻋﺪﺩی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪T٩‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ٬‬ﻟﻐﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻐﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﺒﺎﻫﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T٩‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ٬‬ﻟﻐﺖ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Good‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ‪Home‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫◄ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ABC‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ(‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻐﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ABC‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫)‪ (Option‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ T٩ Languages‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ T٩ off‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ‪ ٬‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫• ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﻑ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫• ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻬﻬﺎی ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻬﻬﺎی ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻔﺖ‬
‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪1:@‘!?-,.‬‬
‫ﺏپﺕﺙ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺁﺃﺅﺇﺉء‪3‬‬
‫ﺱﺵﺹﺽ‪4‬‬
‫ﺩﺫﺭﺯژ‪5‬‬
‫ﺝچﺡﺥ‪6‬‬
‫ﻥﻩﻭی‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻕﻙگﻝﻡ‪8‬‬
‫ﻁﻅﻉﻍﻑ‪9‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪0‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻬﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭼﭗ )ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ٬‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻮﻕ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎی ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫]ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ۶٣ [۴-۴-٧‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪٬‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ٬‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ[‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ‪ /‬ﺭﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ[ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ DTMF‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ DTMF‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎی ‪ DTMF‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‪ ٬‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ‪ ۵‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻣﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﭘﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ‪ /‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺟﺎﺭی ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ‪/‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩی ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﺯﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻬﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‪/‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‪/‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ‪/‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ٬‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮی‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ٬‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 35‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬
‫‪Bluetooth ١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 37‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪١‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ ۶‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 42‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ ۶‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪GPRS‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 48‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 60‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬
‫‪ ۶‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫‪ ۶‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪GPRS‬‬
‫‪ ۶‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 57‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 66‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 71‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫(ﻭ)‬
‫)‬
‫( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻯ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‪ ,‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ,‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ‪ ,‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫]ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪x-١-١-‬‬
‫◄ ﺯﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪x-١-٢-‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﺯﻧﮓ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮی ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺍﺑﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪x-١-٢-‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ )‪ (CLI‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ( ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٢‬‬
‫• ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﺠﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۵-٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺠﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫◄ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫◄ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫]ﺑﻠﻪ[ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۵-٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻦ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫) ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۵-٢‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﻮﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ‪ ٢‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎی ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺎی‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪GPRS‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶-٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪) GPRS‬ﺟﯽ ﭘﯽ‬
‫ﺁﺭ ﺁﺱ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۶-٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۶-٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٣‬‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻮﺷﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-١-٣‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-١-٣‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-١-٣‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ ۴‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ[ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ[‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻭﺍﺣﺪ[ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺣﺪی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎی ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-٣‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۵-٣‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫]ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۵-٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶-٣‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺫﺧﺎﺋﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﺎﺋﺮ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۴‬‬
‫]ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫◄ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫)ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-١-۴‬‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﻳﺎ ]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﭼﭗ‬
‫]ﻟﻴﺴﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﺨﺴﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-١-۴‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﮐﭙﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫)ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪/‬ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﻳﺎ ]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻨﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.a‬‬
‫]ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.b‬‬
‫]ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.c‬‬
‫‪ .d‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .e‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻋﻀﻮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻀﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭی ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫◄ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-١-۴‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-١-۴‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻋﻀﻮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻞ ‪ ٧‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )ﺧﺎﻟﯽ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺯﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻋﻀﺎی‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-١-۴‬‬
‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫◄ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺎﻡ‬‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﯽ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ‬‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶-١-۴‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﭙﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻣﮑﺎ ﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺏﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎک ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧-١-۴‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫]ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫]ﻗﻴﻮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫◄ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﻬﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫◄ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٨-١-۴‬‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻗﻴﻮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫◄ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۴‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی )ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﮏ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﮑﻮﺋﺮ ﮐﺮﺳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺁﻧﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﻴﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻔﺘﮕﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؛‬
‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٢-۴‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺯﻳﺮ؛ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٢-۴‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻬﺎی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٢-۴‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻬﺎی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﭗ‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-٢-۴‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-٢-۴‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۴‬‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﭼﭗ‬
‫]ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ[ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﻼﺩی‪ ،‬ﻗﻤﺮی ﻭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵‬‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ )‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۵‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-١-۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬
‫)‪ (SMS‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻭ ‪ SMS‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮐﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ”‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫“ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ‬
‫“ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ”‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫“ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻰ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ”‬
‫ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻰ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻯ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﻀﺎﻳﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ SMS‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢۵‬ﺗﺎ ‪) ٢٨‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ( ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ۵‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍً ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ‪ :T٩‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ‪ :T٩‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ T٩‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ T٩‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ]ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ[ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮ ﻧ ﺪ ﻧﻮ ﺴﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮋ‬
‫ﺿﻤ ﻤﻪ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺣﺎﻭﻯ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ‬
‫“ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی” ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻯ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻣﻀﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﻀﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-١-۵‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﭗ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ T٩‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ‪ :T٩‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ T٩‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ]ﺩﺭﺝ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫◄ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻳﺎ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ‬‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭘﺎک‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ‪ :T٩‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۵‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ “ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ”‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫◄ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫◄ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻰ ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﻰ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‪:‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺰﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۵‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺘﺮﮐﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-۵‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﭘﺴﺘﯽ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺋﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ(‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﻜﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶-۵‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﻛﺴﻰ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﻭﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻧﻰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻯ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۶-۵‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۶-۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻨﻰ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧-۵‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٧-۵‬‬
‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬‫‪ MMS‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٧-۵‬‬
‫• ﺩﻳﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻛﺠﺎﻳﯽ؟‬
‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﻴﻠﻰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪SMS‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ‪ :T٩‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ‪ :T٩‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬
‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٧-۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٨-۵‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٨-۵‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﮐﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻠﯽ‪ ،X.۴٠٠ ،‬ﭘﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ‪ERMES ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺘﻀﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻠﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮی‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪ :SMS‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ‪ SMS‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٨-۵‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‪ URL ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ‪.‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻐﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺑﺎﺯﺭﮔﺎﻧﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٨-۵‬‬
‫◄ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫◄ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﻨﮓ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-٨-۵‬‬
‫◄ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-٨-۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۶‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫◄ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﯽ ]‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ۵ .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪.+٢ ،+١ ،٠ ،-١ ،-٢‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫◄ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ٣ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻭ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ]‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﺭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫◄ ﻓﻼﺵ ]‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫( ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ‬
‫◄ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ]‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺭﻧﮓ ]‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ٣ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺎﻩ‪/‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫◄ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺰﺭگ )‪ ،(۴٨٠~۶۴٠‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ )‪،(٢۴٠~٣٢٠‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ )‪ (١۶٠~١٢٨‬ﻭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ‬
‫◄ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﯽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﮐﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﺗﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻗﻮﻩ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۶‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۶‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٩‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪ ٣٢٠ ×٢۴٠‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ ۶‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪ ،١٢٨×١۶٠‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ٩‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-۶‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۴-۶‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۴-۶‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۴-۶‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫◄ ﺟﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﯽ‪ :‬ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٩‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ ، MMS‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭘﺎک ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫◄ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﭘﺎک ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫◄ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎی ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-۴-۶‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-۶‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۵-۶‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۵-۶‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۵-۶‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫] ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ /‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ /‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٢-٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٢-٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ( ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-٢-٧‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ :‬ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ – ﺟﻤﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ – ﺷﻨﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ‬
‫]ﻗﻴﻮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻗﻴﻮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٣-٧‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﺮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٧‬‬
‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٢-٧‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-٧‬‬
‫◄ ﻃﺮﺡ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ ۴‬ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺳﺒﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻏﺬی ﻭ ﻣﺘﺎﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫◄ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺵ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻓﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎ ﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻬﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ )ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ( ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﮐﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ‪ LCD‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٣-٧‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۴-٧‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻓﺎﮐﺲ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻓﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭﺷﺮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﺏ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻼﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۴-٧‬‬
‫◄ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪی‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ‬
‫]ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫]ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ[ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‬
‫) ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ (‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۴-٧‬‬
‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻼﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ‪ ٢‬ﺧﻂ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻼﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫) ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-۴-٧‬‬
‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻟﻐﻮ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ )ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﻕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-۴-٧‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶-۴-٧‬‬
‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺪ ‪PIN‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۵-٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎی‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎی ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﻨﻮﻳﺮﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﺮﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪ PUK Code‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ PUK Code .۵‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۵-٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۵-٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺎﺩﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ(‬
‫◄ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺎﺩﺭﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﻨﮓ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺻﺎﺩﺭﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﻨﮓ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﻔﺮﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺯی‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺴﺦ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-۵-٧‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻟﻐﻮ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-۵-٧‬‬
‫‪ ) PIN‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ ،٢‬ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‪/‬ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫]ﻗﻴﻮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺴﺦ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﮐﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‪/‬ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶-٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۶-٧‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧-٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪GPRS‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٨-٧‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ GPRS‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۶-٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻃﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۶-٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺟﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻧﺨﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ً‬
‫ﻗﺒﻼ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﮑﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٨‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﻬﺎی ‪) WAP‬ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ( ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻧﮑﺪﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﺷﻨﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ، WAP‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨﺎً ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﺋﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ URL‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ )‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺵ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ‪WAP‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ‪WAP‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ‪ WAP‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻛﺎﻭﺷﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٨‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-١-٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-١-٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ URL‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎی ‪ URL‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-١-٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪.‬ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ URL‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ‬
‫* ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻛﻠ ﺪ‬
‫“‪ (”“) ”.‬ﻓﺸﺎ ﻫ ﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻔﺎ ﻛﻨ ﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ‪URL‬‬‫ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ”‪ “//:http‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ﻭﺏ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪GPRS ٢‬‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ /‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ :IP‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ )‪ ( IP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‪ :‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ :‬ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﻞ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ WAP‬ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﻞ )ﺁی ﺍﺱ ﺩی ﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ٩۶٠٠‬ﻳﺎ ‪.١۴۴٠٠‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ )ﻭﺏ( ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ :GPRS‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ) ‪(GPRS‬‬‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ :IP‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ )‪ ( IP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (APN) :APN‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‬‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﻫﯽ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﮏ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫‪HTTP‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ‪HTTP‬‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺍﮐﺴﯽ‬‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ :IP‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ IP‬ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﺴﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪DNS‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ IP‬ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪ DNS‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‪ :‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ IP‬ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪ DNS‬ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ‬‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ WAP‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-١-٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﻫﺎ‬
‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩ ﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪URL‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-١-٨‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ URL‬ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶-١-٨‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﻛﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﻛﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭک ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧-١-٨‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻫﺎ ی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٨-١-٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮔﺮ )ﻭﺏ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٩-١-٨‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺳﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-١-٩‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﻴﺪﻟﺖ‬
‫]ﻣﻨﻮ[‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫(‬
‫)‬
‫◄ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻳﮏ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪Sun Microsystems‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﭘﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮﻫﺎ ی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ Netscape‬ﻳﺎ ‪MS Internet‬‬
‫‪ Explorer‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MIDlet‬ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻪ ‪ WAP‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪ JAD.‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ JAR.‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ‪ :‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ • ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ JAR‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪JAD‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻔﯽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ JAD‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ )‪ (J٢ME‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﻜﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫“ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ” ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪J٢ME (Java ٢ Micro‬‬
‫‪ (Edition‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ (J٢SE (Java ٢ standard Edition‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-١-٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ WAP‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٩‬‬
‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻛﻪ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ MMS‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٩‬‬
‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻠﻮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ SMS‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ MMS‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ • ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﻨﺪﺯ ﻓﺮی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﯽ )ﺷﺎﺭژ(‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪F2400 :‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪DCS 1800 / GSM 900 :‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ‪+55°C :‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻗﻞ ‪-10°C :‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
F2400 User Guide - ENGLISH
Table of Contents
Introduction ………………………………………………… 8
Menu Tree ………………………………………………… 32
Guidelines for safe and efficient use ……………………… 9
Selecting functions and options ………………………… 35
F2400 features …………………………………………… 13
Profiles …………………………………………………… 36
Parts of the phone ………………………………………… 13
Activate …………………………………………………… 36
Display information ……………………………………… 16
Personalise ……………………………………………… 36
Rename …………………………………………………… 37
Getting started …………………………………………… 18
Installing the SIM card and the handset battery ………… 18
Call register ……………………………………………… 38
Charging the battery ……………………………………… 20
Missed calls ……………………………………………… 38
Disconnecting the adapter ……………………………… 21
Received calls …………………………………………… 38
Turning your phone on and off …………………………… 21
Dialled calls ……………………………………………… 38
Access codes……………………………………………… 22
Delete recent calls ……………………………………… 39
Barring password ………………………………………… 23
Call charges ……………………………………………… 39
Call duration ……………………………………………… 39
General functions ………………………………………… 24
Call costs ………………………………………………… 39
Making and answering calls……………………………… 24
Settings …………………………………………………… 39
Contacts …………………………………………………… 28
GPRS information ………………………………………… 40
In-call menu ……………………………………………… 29
Call duration ……………………………………………… 40
Multiparty or conference calls …………………………… 30
Data volumes ……………………………………………… 40
4
F2400 User Guide
Tools ……………………………………………………… 41
Copy all …………………………………………………… 45
Bluetooth ………………………………………………… 41
Delete all ………………………………………………… 46
My devices………………………………………………… 41
Information………………………………………………… 46
Handsfree devices ………………………………………… 41
Scheduler ………………………………………………… 47
Settings …………………………………………………… 41
Add new …………………………………………………… 47
Calculator ………………………………………………… 41
View ……………………………………………………… 47
Unit converter …………………………………………… 42
View all …………………………………………………… 48
World time ………………………………………………… 42
Delete past ………………………………………………… 48
Voice recorder …………………………………………… 42
Delete all ………………………………………………… 48
Record …………………………………………………… 42
Memo ……………………………………………………… 48
View list …………………………………………………… 42
Calender setting…………………………………………… 48
Memory status …………………………………………… 42
Messages ………………………………………………… 49
Organiser ………………………………………………… 43
Write message …………………………………………… 49
Contacts …………………………………………………… 43
Write text message ……………………………………… 49
Search …………………………………………………… 43
Write multimedia message ……………………………… 50
Add new …………………………………………………… 43
Inbox ……………………………………………………… 52
Caller groups ……………………………………………… 44
Outbox …………………………………………………… 53
Speed dial ………………………………………………… 44
Drafts ……………………………………………………… 53
Settings …………………………………………………… 45
Listen to voice mail ……………………………………… 54
5
Table of Contents
Info message ……………………………………………… 54
General pictures…………………………………………… 61
Read ……………………………………………………… 55
Mode pictures …………………………………………… 61
Topics ……………………………………………………… 55
Phonebook pictures ……………………………………… 61
Templates ………………………………………………… 55
Settings …………………………………………………… 62
Text templates …………………………………………… 55
Memory status …………………………………………… 62
Multimedia templates……………………………………… 56
Clear album …………………………………………………62
Signature ………………………………………………… 56
Auto save ………………………………………………… 62
Settings …………………………………………………… 56
Text message ……………………………………………… 56
Settings …………………………………………………… 63
Multimedia message ……………………………………… 57
Alarm clock ……………………………………………… 63
Voice mail centre ………………………………………… 57
Date & Time ……………………………………………… 63
Info message ……………………………………………… 58
Set date …………………………………………………… 63
Push messages …………………………………………… 58
Date format ……………………………………………… 63
Set time …………………………………………………… 63
Camera …………………………………………………… 59
Time format ……………………………………………… 63
Take picture ……………………………………………… 59
Phone settings …………………………………………… 63
Take in modes …………………………………………… 60
Display settings …………………………………………… 63
Take continuously ………………………………………… 60
Language ………………………………………………… 64
Album……………………………………………………… 60
Call settings ……………………………………………… 64
All pictures ………………………………………………… 60
Call divert ………………………………………………… 64
6
F2400 User Guide
Answer mode ……………………………………………… 65
Home ……………………………………………………… 70
Send my number ………………………………………… 65
Bookmarks ………………………………………………… 71
Call waiting………………………………………………… 66
Profiles …………………………………………………… 71
Minute minder …………………………………………… 66
Go to URL ………………………………………………… 73
Auto redial ………………………………………………… 66
Cache settings …………………………………………… 73
Security settings ………………………………………… 66
Cookies settings …………………………………………… 73
PIN code request ………………………………………… 66
Security certification ……………………………………… 74
Phone lock ………………………………………………… 67
Reset profiles ……………………………………………… 74
Call barring………………………………………………… 67
Browser version ……………………………………………74
Fixed dial number ………………………………………… 68
SIM service ……………………………………………… 74
Change codes …………………………………………… 68
Network settings ………………………………………… 68
Downloads………………………………………………… 75
Automatic ………………………………………………… 68
Games & more …………………………………………… 75
Manual …………………………………………………… 68
My games & more ………………………………………… 75
Preferred ………………………………………………… 69
Profiles …………………………………………………… 76
Reset settings …………………………………………… 69
Pictures …………………………………………………… 76
GPRS setting ……………………………………………… 69
Sounds …………………………………………………… 76
Service …………………………………………………… 70
Accessories ……………………………………………… 77
Internet …………………………………………………… 70
Technical Data …………………………………………… 78
7
Introduction
Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced
and compact F2400 mobile phone, designed to operate
with the latest digital mobile communication
technology.
This user’s guide contains important information
on the use and operation of this phone. Please
read all the information carefully for optimal
performance and to prevent any damage to or
misuse of the phone. Any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
user’s guide could void your warranty for this
equipment.
8
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may
be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is
given in this manual.
Exposure to radio frequency energy
Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate
(SAR) information
This mobile phone model F2400 has been designed to
comply with applicable safety requirement for
exposure to radio waves. This requirement is based on
scientific guidelines that include safety margins
designed to assure this safety of all persons,
regardless of age and health.
• The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of
measurement known as the Specific Absorption
Rate, or SAR. Tests for SAR are conducted using
standardized method with the phone transmitting at
its highest certified power level in all used frequency
bands.
• While there may be differences between the SAR
levels of various LG phone models, they are all
designed to meet the relevant guidelines for
exposure to radio waves.
• The SAR limit recommended by the international
Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection
(ICNIRP), which is 2W/kg averaged over ten (10)
gram of tissue.
• The highest SAR value for this model phone tested
by DASY3 for use at the ear is 1.3 W/kg (10g).
Product care and maintenance
Warning: Use only batteries, charger and accessories
approved for use with this particular phone model.
The use of any other types may invalidate any
approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may
be dangerous.
• Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified
service technician when repair work is required.
• Keep away from electrical appliance such as a TV,
radio or personal computer.
• The unit should be kept away from heat sources
such as radiators or cookers.
• Do not drop.
• Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or
shock.
9
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
• The coating of the phone may be damaged if
covered with wrap or vinyl wrapper.
• Use dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit.
(Do not use solvent such as benzene, thinner or
alcohol.)
• Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust.
• Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or
transport tickets; it can affect the information on the
magnetic strips.
• Do not tap the screen with a sharp object;
otherwise, it may damage the phone.
• Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture.
• Use the accessories like an earphone cautiously.
Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily.
Electronics devices
All mobile phones may get interference, which could
affect performance.
• Do not use your mobile phone near medical
equipment without requesting permission. Avoid
placing the phone over the pacemaker, i.e. in your
breast pocket.
• Some hearing aids might be disturbed by mobile
phones.
• Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, PCs, etc.
Road safety
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile
phones in the areas when you drive.
• Do not use a hand-held phone while driving.
• Give full attention to driving.
• Use a hands-free kit, if available.
• Pull off the road and park before making or
answering a call if driving conditions so require.
10
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
• RF energy may affect some electronic systems in
your motor vehicle such as car stereo, safety
equipment.
• When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do
not obstruct with installed or portable wireless
equipment. It can cause serious injury due to
improper performance.
Blasting area
Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress.
Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or
rules.
Potentially explosive atmospheres
• Do not use the phone at a refueling point. Don’t use
near fuel or chemicals.
• Do not transport or store flammable gas, liquid, or
explosives in the compartment of your vehicle, which
contains your mobile phone and accessories.
In aircraft
Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft.
• Turn off your mobile phone before boarding any
aircraft.
• Do not use it on the ground without crew permission.
Children
Keep the phone in a safe place out of small children’s
reach. It includes small parts which if detached may
cause a choking hazard.
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not be available under all
cellular networks. Therefore, you should never depend
solely on the phone for emergency calls. Check with
your local service provider.
11
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Battery information and care
• You do not need to completely discharge the battery
before recharging. Unlike other battery systems,
there is no memory effect that could compromise the
battery’s performance.
• Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are
designed to maximize the battery life.
• Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack.
• Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean.
• Replace the battery when it no longer provides
acceptable performance. The battery pack may be
recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing.
• Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a
long time to maximize usability.
• Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight
or use it in high humidity, such as the bathroom.
• Do not leave the battery in hot or cold places, this
may deteriorate the battery performance.
12
F2400 features
1. Headset jack
Parts of the phone
• Connect a headset here.
Front view
2. Up/down side keys
• Press this key to display the current time on the
front screen.
3. Front screen
1. Headset jack
2. Up/down side keys
4. Camera lens
• Controls the volume of keypad tone in standby
mode with the clamshell open.
• Controls the earpiece volume during a phone call.
3. Front screen
4. Camera lens
5. Flash
n Note Dirt on the camera lens could affect the image
quality.
5. Flash
13
F2400 features
Right side view
Rear view
Battery latch
Press this button to remove the
battery cover.
Camera key
Press and hold down this key to activate the
camera mode. Also use this key to take a shot.
Battery cover
Holes for a
carrying strap
SIM card
socket
Battery pack
Battery terminals
SIM card terminals
Charger connector/
Cable connector
14
F2400 features
1. Earpiece
Open view
2, 10. Left soft key/ Right soft key: Performs the
function indicated by the text on the screen
immediately above it.
1. Earpiece
3. Scheduler key: A shortcut key to the Scheduler
menu.
7. Main screen
Menu
Contacts
4. Send key: Dials a phone number and answers
incoming calls. You can also quickly access the
latest incoming, outgoing and missed calls by
pressing the key in standby mode.
8. Navigation keys
2. Left soft key
9. Confirm key
10. Right soft key
3. Scheduler key
11. Downloads key
5. Alphanumeric keys: Enter numbers, letters and
some special characters.
6. Microphone: Can be muted during a call for privacy.
4. Send key
12. End/Power key
5. Alphanumeric
keys
13. Clear key
7. Main screen: Displays phone status icons, menu
items, Web information, pictures and more in full
colour.
14. Special
function keys
8. Navigation keys: Use to scroll through menus and
move the cursor.
6. Microphone
9. Confirm key: Selects menu options and confirms
actions.
15
F2400 features
11. Downloads key: A shortcut key to the Downloads
menu.
12. End/Power key: Used to end a call or reject a call
and also to go back to standby mode. Hold this key
down to turn the phone on/off.
13. Clear key: Deletes a character by each press. Hold
the key down to clear all input. Also use this key to
go back to the previous screen.
14. Special function keys:
•
: A long press of this key enters the
international call character “+”.
•
: While keying in a phone number, a long
press of this key enters a pause.
Display information
The table below describes various display indicators
or icons that appear on the phone’s display screen.
On-Screen Icons
Icon
Description
Indicates the strength of the network
signal.
Indicates a call is in progress.
Indicates that you are roaming on another
network.
Indicates that GPRS service is available.
Indicates the alarm has been set and is on.
Indicates the status of the battery charge.
Indicates the receipt of a message.
Indicates the receipt of a voice message.
16
F2400 features
Icon
Description
Indicates that the vibration ringer has been
set.
Indicates the receipt of an e-mail
message.
Indicates the Loud profile is activated.
Indicates the Silent profile is activated.
Indicates the Headset profile is activated.
Indicates the General profile is activated.
Indicates that you can use the push
message service.
Indicates that the phone is accessing the
WAP.
Indicates that you are using GPRS.
Indicates that you entered the security
page.
17
Getting started
Installing the SIM card and the handset
battery
Make sure the power is off before you remove the
battery.
1. Remove the battery cover.
Press the battery release latch and slide the battery
cover toward the bottom of the phone. And remove
the battery cover.
n Note Removing the battery from the phone when the
power is on may cause the phone to malfunction.
18
2. Remove the battery.
Hold the top edge of the battery and lift the battery
from the battery compartment.
Getting started
3. Install the SIM card
4. Install the battery.
Insert the SIM card into the holder. Slide the SIM
card into the SIM card holder. Make sure that the
SIM card is inserted properly and that the gold
contact area on the card is facing downwards. To
remove the SIM card, press down lightly and pull it
in the reverse direction.
Insert the bottom of the battery first into the bottom
edge of the battery compartment. Push down the
top of the battery until it snaps into space.
5. Replace the battery cover.
To insert the SIM card
To remove the SIM card
Lay the battery cover in place of the phone and slide
it until the latch clicks.
n Caution The metal contact of the SIM card can be
easily damaged by scratches. Pay special
attention to the SIM card while handling.
Follow the instructions supplied with the SIM
card.
19
Getting started
Charging the battery
To connect the mains adapter to the phone, you must
have installed the battery.
n Caution
• Do not force the connector as this may
damage the phone and/or the travel adapter.
• Insert the battery pack charger vertically to
wall power outlet.
• If you use the battery pack charger out of
your own country, use an attachment plug
adapter for the proper configuration.
• Do not remove your battery or the SIM card
while charging.
n Warning • Unplug the power cord and charger during
lightning storms to avoid electric shock or
fire.
1. With the arrow facing you as shown in the diagram
push the plug on the battery adapter into the socket
on the bottom of the phone until it clicks into place.
2. Connect the other end of the mains adapter to the
mains socket. Use only the included packing
charger.
3. The moving bars of battery icon will stop after
charging is complete.
20
• Make sure that no sharp-edged items such
as animal teeth, nails, come into contact
with the battery. There is a risk of this
causing a fire.
• Do not place or answer calls while charging
the phone as it may short-circuit the phone
and/or cause electric shock or fire.
Getting started
Disconnecting the adapter
Turning your phone on and off
1. When charging is finished, the moving bars of the
battery icon stop and ‘Full’ is displayed on the
screen.
Turning your phone ON
2. Unplug the adapter from the power outlet.
Disconnect the adapter from the phone by pressing
the grey tabs on both sides of the connector and
pull the connector out.
1. Install a battery to the handset and connect the
phone to an external power source such as the
travel adapter, cigarette lighter adapter or
hands-free car kit. Or install a charged battery pack
to the handset.
2. Press
for a few seconds until the LCD screen
is turned on.
3. Depending on the status of the PIN code request
setting you may need to enter your PIN code.
Turning your phone OFF
n Note • Ensure the battery is fully charged before first
using the phone.
1. Press
for a few seconds until the LCD screen
is turned off.
• Do not remove the battery or SIM card while
charging.
• In the case the battery is not properly charged,
please turn the phone off and on using the
power key, then recharge the battery. After
detaching and reattaching the battery, please
recharge the battery.
21
Getting started
Access codes
PUK code (4 to 8 digits)
You can use the access codes described in this
section to avoid unauthorised use of your phone. The
access codes (except PUK and PUK2 codes) can be
changed by using the Change codes feature
[Menu 7-5-5]. See page 68.
The PUK (PIN Unblocking Key) code is required to
change a blocked PIN code. The PUK code may be
supplied with the SIM card. If not, contact your
network operator for the code. If you lose the code,
also contact your network operator.
PIN code (4 to 8 digits)
PUK2 code (4 to 8 digits)
The PIN (Personal Identification Number) code
protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The
PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. When
the PIN code request is set to Enable, your phone will
request the PIN code every time the phone is
switched on. When the PIN code request is set to
Disable, your phone connects to the network directly
without the PIN code.
The PUK2 code, supplied with some SIM cards, is
required to change a blocked PIN2 code. If you lose
the code, also contact your network operator.
PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits)
The PIN2 code, supplied with some SIM cards, is
required to access functions such as Advice of Call
Charge and Fixed dial number. These functions are
only available if supported by your SIM card. Check
with your network for further information.
22
Security code (4 to 8 digits)
The security code protects the unauthorised use of
your phone. The default security code is set to ‘0000’
and the security code is required to delete all phone
entries and to activate the Reset settings menu. Also,
the security code is required to enable or disable the
phone lock function to prevent unauthorised use of the
phone. The security code default setting can be
modified from the Security settings menu.
Getting started
Barring password
The barring password is required when you use Call
barring [Menu 7-5-3] function. You obtain the
password from your network operator when you
subscribe to this function. See page 67 for further
details.
23
General functions
Making and answering calls
Making an international call
Making a call
1. Press and hold the
key for the international
prefix. The ‘+’ character automatically selects the
international access code.
1. Make sure your phone is switched on.
2. Enter a phone number, including the area code.
] Press and hold the clear key (
the entire number.
3. Press the send key (
) to erase
3. Press
) to call the number.
4. To end the call, press the end key (
right soft key.
) or the
Making a call using the send key
1. In standby mode, press the send key (
), and
the latest incoming, outgoing and missed phone
numbers will be displayed.
2. Select the desired number by using the up/down
navigation key.
3. Press
24
.
2. Enter the country code, area code, and the phone
number.
.
Ending a call
When you have finished your call, press the end
(
) key.
Making a call from the address book
You can save the names and phone numbers dialled
regularly in the SIM card and/or phone memory, which
is address book You can dial a number by simply
looking up the desired name in the address book.
General functions
Adjusting the volume
] You can answer a call while using the address
book or other menu features.
If you want to adjust the earpiece volume during a
call, use the side keys ( ) . Press the up side key to
increase and down side key to decrease the volume.
2. To end the call, close the phone or press the
key.
n Note In standby mode with the sliding keypad down,
pressing the side keys adjusts the key tone volume.
Manner mode (Quick)
Answering a call
When you receive a call, the phone rings and the
flashing phone icon appears on the screen. If the
caller can be identified, the caller’s phone number
(or name if saved in the phonebook) is displayed.
1. To answer an incoming call, open the phone. (When
Flip open has been set as the answer mode. See
page 65 [Menu 7-4-2].)
n Note If Press any key has been set as the answer
mode (see page 65), any key press will answer a
call except for the
or the right soft key.
] To reject an incoming call, press and hold one of
the side keys on the left side of the phone without
opening the phone.
You can activate the manner mode by pressing and
holding down the
key after opening the phone.
Signal strength
You can check the strength of your signal by the signal
indicator (
) on the LCD screen of your phone.
Signal strength can vary, particularly inside buildings.
Moving near to a window may improve reception.
Entering text
You can enter alphanumeric characters by using the
phone’s keypad. For example, storing names in the
phonebook, writing a message, creating a personal
greeting.
The following text input methods are available in the
phone.
25
General functions
T9 mode
This mode lets you enter words with only one
keystroke per letter. Each key on the keypad has
more than one letter. The T9 mode automatically
compares your keystrokes with an internal
dictionary to determine the correct word, thus
requiring far fewer keystrokes than the traditional
ABC mode. This is sometimes known as predictive
text.
ABC mode
This mode lets you enter letters by pressing the key
labelled with the required letter once, twice, three
or four times until the letter is displayed.
123 mode (Number mode)
Type numbers using one keystroke per number. To
change to 123 mode in a text entry field, press the
key until 123 mode is displayed.
26
Changing the text input mode
1. When you are in a field that
allows characters to be entered,
you will notice the text input
mode indicator in the lower right
corner of the LCD screen.
2. Change the text input mode by
pressing
. You can check the
current text input mode in the
lower right corner of the LCD
screen.
text input mode
Options
Insert
] Using the T9 mode
The T9 predictive text input mode lets you enter words
easily with a minimum number of key presses. As you
press each key, the phone begins to display the
characters that it thinks you are typing based on the
built-in dictionary. You can also add new words in the
dictionary. As new words are added, the word
changes to reflect the most likely candidate from the
dictionary.
General functions
1. When you are in the T9 predictive text input mode,
start entering a word by pressing keys
to
. Press one key per letter.
- The word changes as letters are typed. Ignore
what’s on the screen until the word is typed
completely.
- If the word is still incorrect after typing completely,
press the down navigation key one or more to
cycle through the other word options.
Example:
n Note You can't use this function in the Phonebook list
mode.
2. Enter the whole word before editing or deleting any
keystrokes.
3. Complete each word with a space by pressing the
key. To delete letters, press
. Press and
hold down
to erase entire words.
n Note To exit from the text input mode without saving your
input, press
. The phone goes back to standby
mode.
Press
to type Good
] Using the ABC mode
Press
type Home
[Down navigation key] to
Use the
- If the desired word is missing from the word
choice list, add it using the ABC mode.
- You can select the language of the T9 mode. Press
the left soft key [Option], then select T9 languages.
Select the desired language of T9 mode. You can
also turn off the T9 mode by selecting T9 off. The
default setting on the phone is T9 enabled mode.
You can also change the language by a long press
of
.
to
keys to enter your text.
1. Press the key labelled with the required letter:
- Once for the first letter
- Twice for the second letter
- And so on
2. To insert a space, press the
key once. To
delete letters, press the
key. Press and hold
down the
key to clear the whole display.
27
General functions
n Note Refer to the table below for more information on the
characters available using the alphanumeric keys.
Characters in the order display
Key
Lower Case
Upper Case
The 123 mode enables you to enter numbers in a text
message (a telephone number, for example).
Press the keys corresponding to the required digits
before manually switching back to the appropriate text
entry mode.
. , / ? ! - : ' '' 1
. , / ? ! - : ' '' 1
ABC2ÄÀÁÂÃÅÆÇ
abc2äàáâãåæç
Contacts
DEF3ËÈÉÊ
def3ëèéê
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding
names in the memory of your SIM card.
ˇ
GHI4ÏÌÍÎG
g h i 4 ï ì í î gˇ
JKL5
jkl5
MNO6ÑÖØÒÓÔÕŒ mno6ñöøòóôõœ
28
] Using the 123 (Number) mode
P Q R S 7 ß S¸
p q r s 7 ß s¸
TUV8ÜÙÚÛ
tuv8üùúû
WXYZ9
wxyz9
Space, 0
Space, 0
In addition, you can store up to 200 numbers and
names in the phone memory.
The SIM card and phone are both used in the same
way in the Contacts menu.
General functions
In-call menu
Answering an incoming call
Your phone provides a number of control functions
that you can use during a call. To access these
functions during a call, press the left soft key
[Options].
To answer an incoming call when the handset is
ringing, simply press the
key. The handset is
also able to warn you of an incoming call while you
are already on a call. A tone sounds in the earpiece,
and the display will show that a second call is waiting.
During a call
The menu displayed on the handset screen during a
call is different to the default main menu displayed
when in standby mode, and the options are described
below.
Making a second call
You can get a number you wish to dial from the
phonebook to make a second call. Press the right soft
key then select Search. To save the dialled number
into the phonebook during a call, press the right soft
key then select Add new.
Switching between two calls
To switch between two calls, press the left soft key
then select Swap.
This feature, known as Call waiting, is only available if
your network supports it. For details of how to activate
and deactivate it see Call waiting [Menu 7-4-4] on
page 66.
If Call waiting is activated, you can put the first call
on hold and answer the second, by pressing
or
by selecting left soft key, then Hold & Answer. You
can end the current call and answer the waiting call
by selecting left soft key and then End & Answer.
Rejecting an incoming call
You can reject an incoming call without answering by
simply pressing the
key.
During a call, you can reject an incoming call by
pressing the
.
29
General functions
Muting the microphone
You can mute the microphone during a call by
pressing the [Options] key then selecting Mute on. The
handset can be unmuted by selecting Mute off. When
the handset is muted, the caller cannot hear you, but
you can still hear them.
person who set up the multiparty call. These options
are all available from the In-Call menu. The maximum
callers in a multiparty call are five. Once started, you
are in control of the multiparty call, and only you can
add callers to the multiparty call.
Making a second call
To turn DTMF tones on during a call, press the left soft
key, and then select DTMF on. DTMF tones can be
turned off the same way. DTMF tones allow your
phone to make use of an automated switchboard.
You can make a second call while currently on a call.
Enter the second number and press the
key.
When the second call is connected, the first call is
automatically placed on hold. You can swap between
calls by pressing the left soft key then selecting Swap.
Multiparty or conference calls
Setting up a conference call
The multiparty or conference service provides you
with the ability to have a simultaneous conversation
with more than one caller, if your network operator
supports this feature. A multiparty call can only be set
up when you have one active call and one call on
hold, both calls having been answered. Once a
multiparty call is set up, calls can be added,
disconnected or separated (that is, removed from the
multiparty call but still connected to you) by the
Place one call on hold and while the active call is on,
press the left soft key and then select the
Conference/Join All.
Switching DTMF tones on during a call
30
Putting a conference call on hold
Press the left soft key, then select the
Conference/Hold All.
General functions
Activate the conference call on hold
Ending a conference call
Press the left soft key, then select the
Conference/Join All.
The currently displayed caller from a conference call
can be disconnected by pressing the
key. To end
a conference call, press the left soft key, then select
the Multiparty/End Multiparty. After pressing the left
soft key, selecting End all Calls will end all the active
and on-hold calls.
Adding calls to the conference call
To add a call to an existing conference call, press the
left soft key, then select the Conference/Join All.
Displaying callers in a conference call
To scroll through the numbers of the callers who make
up a conference call on the handset screen, use the
up/down navigation keys.
Taking a private call during a conference call
To have a private call with one caller from a
conference call, display the number of the caller you
wish to talk to on the screen, then press the left soft
key. Select the Conference/Private to put all the other
callers on hold.
31
Menu Tree
1. Profiles (see page 36)
3. Tools (see page 41)
1 Vibrate only
1 Bluetooth
2 Silent
2 Calculator
3 General
3 Unit converter
4 Loud
4 World time
5 Headset
5 Voice recorder
6 Memory status
2. Call register (see page 38)
1 Missed calls
1 Contacts
3 Dialled calls
2 Scheduler
4 Delete recent calls
3 Memo
5 Call charges
4 Calender setting
6 GPRS information
32
4. Organiser (see page 43)
2 Received calls
Menu Tree
5. Messages (see page 49)
7. Settings (see page 63)
1 Write message
1 Alarm clock
2 Inbox
2 Date & Time
3 Outbox
3 Phone settings
4 Drafts
4 Call settings
5 Listen to voice mail
5 Security settings
6 Info message
6 Network settings
7 Templates
7 Reset settings
8 Settings
8 GPRS setings
6. Camera (see page 59)
1 Take picture
2 Take in modes
3 Take continuously
4 Album
5 Settings
33
Menu Tree
8. Service (see page 70)
9. Downloads (see page 75)
1 Internet
1 Games & more
2 SIM service
2 Pictures
3 Sounds
34
Selecting functions and options
Your phone offers a set of functions that allow you to
customise the phone. These functions are arranged in
menus and sub-menus, accessed via the two soft keys
marked [
] and [
]. Each menu and
sub-menu lets you view and alter the settings of a
particular function.
Menu
Contacts
The roles of the soft keys vary according to the
current context; the label on the bottom line of the
screen just above each key indicates its current role.
Press the left soft key
to access the
available menu.
Press the right soft
key to access the
available Contacts.
35
Profiles
Menu 1
In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone
tones for different events, environments, or caller
groups. There are five preset profiles: Vibrate only,
Silent, General, Loud and Headset. Each profile can
be personalised. Press the left soft key [Menu] and
select Profiles using up/down navigation keys.
Activate
Menu 1-x-1
1. A list of profiles is displayed.
2. In the Profiles list, scroll to the profile you want to
activate and press the left soft key
[Select] or
OK key.
3. Then, select Activate.
Personalise
Menu 1-x-2
Scroll to the desired profile in the Profile list. After
pressing the left soft key
or the OK key, select
Personalise. The profile setting option opens. Set the
option as required.
] Call alert type: Set the alert type for incoming calls.
] Ring tone: Select the desired ring tone from the list.
36
] Ring volume: Set the volume of the ringing tone.
] Message alert type: Set the alert type for
messages.
] Message tone: Select the alert tone for messages.
] Keypad tone: Select the desired keypad tone.
] Keypad volume: Set the volume of keypad tone.
] Flip tone: Allows to set the flip tone for adjusting
environment.
] Effect sound volume: Set the volume of effect
sound.
] Power on/off volume: Set the volume of the ringing
tone when switching the phone on/off.
] Auto answer: This function will be activated only
when your phone is connected to the headset.
• Off: The phone will not answer automatically.
• After 5 secs: After 5 seconds, the phone will
answer automatically.
• After 10 secs: After 10 seconds, the phone will
answer automatically.
Profiles
Rename
Menu 1-x-3
You can rename a profile and give it any name you
want.
n Note Vibrate only, Silent and Headset profiles cannot be
renamed.
1. To change the name of a profile, scroll to the profile
in the profile list and after pressing the left soft key
or the OK key, select Rename.
2. Key in the desired name and press the OK key or the
left soft key
[OK].
37
Call register
Menu 2
You can check the record of missed, received, and
dialled calls only if the network supports the Calling
Line Identification (CLI) within the service area.
Received calls
Menu 2-2
This option lets you view the last 10 incoming calls.
You can also:
The number and name (if available) are displayed
together with the date and time at which the call was
made. You can also view call times.
• View the number if available and call it, or save it in
Address Book
Missed calls
• Enter a new name for the number and save both in
Address Book
Menu 2-1
This option lets you view the last 10 unanswered calls.
You can also:
• View the number if available and call it, or save it in
Address Book
• Enter a new name for the number and save both in
Address Book
• Send a message by this number
• Delete the call from the list
• Send a message by this number
• Delete the call from the list
Dialled calls
Menu 2-3
This option lets you view the last 20 outgoing calls
(called or attempted).
You can also:
• View the number if available and call it or save it in
Address Book
• Enter new name for the number and save both in
Address Book
• Send a message by this number
• Delete the call from the list
38
Call register
Delete recent calls
Menu 2-4
Call costs
Menu 2-5-2
Allows you to delete Missed calls and Received calls
lists. You can delete Dialled calls and All calls lists at
one time.
Allows you to check the cost of your last call, all calls,
remaining and reset the cost. To reset the cost, you
need to PIN2 code.
Call charges
Settings
Call duration
Menu 2-5
Menu 2-5-1
Allows you to view the duration of your incoming and
outgoing calls. You can also reset the call times. The
following timers are available:
] Last call: Length of the last call.
] All calls: Total length of all calls made and
incoming calls since the timer was last reset.
] Received calls: Length of the incoming calls.
] Dialled calls: Length of the outgoing calls.
] Reset all: Allows you to clear the length of all calls
by pressing the left soft key
[Yes ].
(SIM Dependent)
Menu 2-5-3
] Set tariff: You can set the currency type and the
unit price. Contact your service providers to obtain
charging unit prices. To select the currency or unit
in this menu, you need the PIN2 code.
] Set credit: This network allows you to limit the cost
of your calls by selected charging units.If you
select Read, the number of remaining unit is shown.
If you select Change, you can change your change
limit.
] Auto display: This network service allows you to
see automatically the cost of your last calls. If set
to On, you can see the last cost when the call is
released.
39
Call register
GPRS information
Menu 2-6
You can check the amount of data transferred over the
network through the GPRS information option. In
addition, you can also view how much time you are
online.
Call duration
Menu 2-6-1
You can check the duration of Last call and All calls.
You can also reset the call timers.
Data volumes
Menu 2-6-2
You can check The Sent, Received or All data volumes
and Reset all.
40
Tools
Menu 3
Bluetooth
Menu 3-1
Bluetooth enables compatible mobile devices,
peripherals and computers that are in close proximity
to communicate directly with each other without
wires. This handset supports built-in Bluetooth
connectivity, which makes it possible to connect them
with compatible Bluetooth headsets, computer
applications and so on.
My devices
Menu 3-1-1
You can view all devices which are compatible with
Bluetooth phone.
Handsfree devices
Menu 3-1-2
You can view the list of handsfree devices which are
compatible with bluetooth phone.
Settings
Menu 3-1-3
Calculator
Menu 3-2
This contains the standard functions such as +, –, x, ÷
: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division.
1. Input the numbers by pressing numeric keys.
2. Use a navigation key to select a sign for calculation.
3. Then input the numbers.
4. Press the left soft key
result.
[Result] to view the
5. Press the left soft key
[Reset] or enter numbers
to repeat the procedure above.
6. To end Calculator, press the right soft key
[Back].
n Note Use
key to erase any numbers or signs. If you
press
key, you can input a minus number. In
addition, press
key, you can input a decimal
number.
You can register new device which is compatible with
bluetooth. If you already have added the device, you
can search it after entering a password.
41
Tools
Unit converter
Menu 3-3
This converts any measurement into a unit you want.
There are 4 types that can be converted into units:
Length, Area, Weight, and Volume.
Voice recorder
Menu 3-5
The voice memo feature you to record up to 10 voice
messages and each memo is up to 20 Seconds.
Record
Menu 3-5-1
1. You can select one of four unit types by pressing
[Unit] key.
You can record voice memo in Voice recorder menu.
2. Select the standard value by using
1. Once recording is started, the message Recording
and the remaining time is displayed.
,
.
3. Select the unit you want to convert by pressing
and
.
4. You can check the converted value for the unit you
want. Also, you can input a decimal number by
pressing
.
World time
Menu 3-4
You can view clocks of the world’s major cities.
1. Select the city belonged to the time zone by
pressing ,
key.
2. You can set the current time to the city time you
select by pressing the left soft key
[Set].
42
2. If you want to finish recording, press the left soft
key
[Save].
3. Key in Voice memo title, press the left soft key
[OK].
View list
Menu 3-5-2
The phone shows voice memo list. You can Playback
and Delete the recorded voice memo.
Memory status
Menu 3-6
You can check free space and memory usage of each
repository, SIM memory. You can go to each
repository menu.
Organiser
Menu 4
Contacts
n Note In standby mode, press right soft key
to access directly.
Menu 4-1
[Contacts]
Search
(Calling from phonebook)
Menu 4-1-1
] Write text/multimedia message: After you have
found the number you want, you can send a text/
multimedia message to the selected number.
] Send via Bluetooth: You can send the data of phone
book to devices which is compatible with bluetooth
through bluetooth.
1. Select Search by press the left soft key
[Select] or [OK].
] Copy: You can copy an entry from SIM to phone or
from phone to SIM.
2. Enter the name that you want to search or select
left soft key
[List] to view all the phonebook
list.
] Main number: You can select the one out of mobile,
home, office that you often use. After you set this,
the main number will be displayed first, when you
search.
n Note Instant searching is available by inputting the initial
letter of the name or number you want to search.
3. If you want to edit, delete, copy an entry, or to add
the voice to one, select left soft key
[Options].
The following menu will be displayed.
] Edit: You can edit the name, number, group,
character and picture by using the navigation key.
] Delete: You can delete an entry.
Add new
Menu 4-1-2
You can add phonebook entry by using this function.
Phone memory capacity is 200 entries. SIM card
memory capacity depends on the cellular service
provider. You can also save 20 characters of name in
The Phone memory, and save characters in the SIM
card. The number of character is SIM dependent
feature.
43
Organiser
1. Select Add new by press left soft key
or [OK].
[Select]
2. Select the memory you want to save: SIM or Phone.
If you set to Phone, you need to select which
number you want as Main number.
a. Press
[OK] to input a name.
b. Press
[OK], then you can input a number.
c. Press
[OK].
d. You can set a group for the entry by pressing
, :
e. You can set a character and a picture for the
entry by pressing
,
, , .
Caller groups
Menu 4-1-3
] Group icon: Allows you to select the icon
dependent on Group.
] Add member: You can add group members. Each
group member shouldn’t be exceeded 20.
] Remove member: You can remove the member from
the Group member list. But the name and the
number still remain in phonebook.
] Rename: You can change a group name.
Speed dial
Menu 4-1-4
You can assign any of the keys,
to
with a
Name list entry. You can call directly by pressing this
key.
1. Open the phonebook first by pressing the Right soft
key
[Contacts] in standby mode.
You can list up to 20 members per one group. There
are 7 groups you can make lists to.
2. Scroll to Speed dial, then press the left soft key
[Select].
] Member list: Shows the group members you have
selected.
3. If you want to add Speed dial, select (empty). Then,
you can search the name in phonebook.
] Group ring tone: Allows you to specify ring tone for
the group members’ call.
4. Select allocated a name by speed dial, and choose
Change or Delete to edit the name.
44
Organiser
Settings
1. Press the right soft
mode.
Menu 4-1-5
[Contacts] in standby
] View options
Scroll to highlight View options, and then press the
left soft key
[Select].
2. Scroll to Settings, then press the left soft key
[Select].
- Name only: Set the phonebook list with displaying
only name.
] Set memory
- With pictures: Set the phonebook list with the
information of character and picture.
Scroll to highlight Set memory, and then press the
left soft key
[Select].
- Name & number: Set the phonebook list with
displaying name and number.
- If you select Variable, when adding entry, the
phone will ask where to store.
Copy all
- If you select SIM or Phone, the phone will store
an entry to SIM or phone.
You can copy/move entries from SIM card memory to
Phone memory and vice versa.
] Search by
Scroll to highlight Search by, then press the left soft
key
[Select].
- If you select Variable, the phone will ask how to
search.
- If you select Name or Number, the phone will
search an entry by Name or Number.
Menu 4-1-6
1. Open the Phonebook first by pressing the right soft
key
[Contacts] in standby mode.
2. Scroll to Copy all, and then press the left soft key
[Select] to enter this menu.
• SIM to Phone: You can copy the entry from SIM
Card to Phone memory.
45
Organiser
• Phone to SIM: You can copy the entry from Phone
memory to SIM Card.
3. You can see the following submenus.
• Keep original: When copying, Original Dial
Number is kept.
• Delete original: When copying, Original Dial
Number will be erased.
Delete all
Menu 4-1-7
You can delete all entries in SIM and Phone. This
function requires Security code.
1. Press the right soft key
[Contacts] in standby
mode and select Delete all, press
[Select].
2. Then select a memory to erase.
3. Enter security code and Press the left soft key
[OK] or the right soft key
[Back].
Information
Menu 4-1-8
] Service dial number
Use this function to access a particular list of
services provided by your network operator
(if supported by the SIM card).
1. Open the phonebook first by pressing the right
soft key
[Contacts] in standby mode and
select Information.
2. Scroll to Service dial number, then press the left
soft key
[Select] to enter.
3. The names of the available services will be
shown.
4. Use
and
[Send].
to select a service. Press
] Memory status
This feature allows you to see how many free and
in-use are in your phonebook.
46
Organiser
1. Open the phonebook first by pressing the right
soft key [Contacts] in standby mode. Select
Information by pressing the left soft key
[Select].
2. Scroll to Memory status, then press the left soft
key
[OK].
] Own number (SIM dependent)
You can save and check your own number in SIM
card.
Scheduler
Menu 4-2
When you enter this menu a Calendar will show up.
On top of the screen there are sections for date.
Whenever you change the date, the calendar will be
updated according to the date.
And square cursor will be used to locate the certain
day. If you see under bar on the calendar, it means
that there is a schedule or memo that day. This
function helps to remind you of your schedule and
memo. The phone will sound an alarm tone if you set
this for the note.
Key
Description
Key
Description
Yearly
Weekly
Monthly
Daily
In the scheduler mode, press left soft key
[Options] as follows;
Add new
Menu 4-2-1
Allows you to add new schedule and memo for the
chosen day. You can store up to 20 notes.
Input the subject and then press left soft key
[OK]. You enter the appropriate information in the
follow section; Time, Repeat and Alarm.
View
Menu 4-2-2
View all schedules and memo for the chosen day. Use
,
to browse through the note lists. If you
set alarm for the note, the alarm icon is displayed.
If you want to view the note in detail, press left soft
key
[Select]. Press left soft key
[Options] to
delete, edit the note you selected.
To change the day, month, and year.
47
Organiser
View all
Menu 4-2-3
Shows the notes that are set for all days. Use
,
to browse through the note lists. If you want to
view the note in detail, press left soft key
[Select].
Delete past
Menu 4-2-4
You can delete the past schedule that has been
already notified you.
Delete all
You can delete for the all notes.
Memo
Menu 4-3
1. Select the Memo by pressing the left soft key
[Select].
2. If being empty, Add new by pressing the left soft key
[Add].
3. Input the memo and then press left soft key
[Ok].
n Note If you want to change the text input mode, press the
in order.
Menu 4-2-5
Calender setting
Menu 4-4
Select which calendar will be used from A.D., Hijriyya,
and Farsi.
48
Messages
Menu 5
Press the Menu key (
using navigation keys.
Write message
Write text message
) and select Messages
Menu 5-1
Menu 5-1-1
Your phone receives voice mail notification messages
and Short Message Service(SMS) messages.
Voice mail and SMS are network services. Please
contact your network operator for more information.
When the
icon appears, you have received voice
mail. When the
icon appears, you have received a
new text message. If the message memory is full, a
message is displayed, the
icon flashes and you
cannot receive any new messages. Use the Delete
option in the Inbox menu to delete obsolete messages.
Once there is space in the message memory, any
undelivered SMS messages will be received (provided
sufficient space is available).
1. Key in your message. For details on how to enter
text, refer to page 25 through 28 (Entering Text).
2. After you complete the message, to select the
required option, press the left soft key [Options].
The following options are available.
] Send: Enter the number or select the number from
the phonebook or the recent numbers. You can
send a message up to 5 phone numbers at a time.
Press the left soft key [Options]. The following
options will be displayed.
1 Send (It only shows after a phone number is
entered)
2 Recent numbers
3 Search
] Save: Allows you to save the message so that it can
be sent later.
] Font: Sets the font size and style.
] Colour: You can select colour of foreground and
background.
] Alignment: You can set the position of the message
- Right, Centre or Left.
49
Messages
] Add T9 dictionary: You can add your own word.
This menu can be shown only when the edit mode
is Predictive.
] T9 languages: Select the language for T9 input
mode. You can also deactivate T9 input mode by
selecting ‘T9 off ’.
] Exit: If you select this while writing the message,
you can exit from writing message and go back to
the previous screen. The message you have written
is not stored.
3. You can also send attachments with the message by
pressing the right soft key [Attach], while you’re
entering a message.
] Symbol: You can attach special characters.
] Picture: You can send and receive text messages
that contain pictures, known as ‘picture messages’.
Several preset pictures are available in the phone
and they can be replaced with new ones received
from other sources.
] Sound: If available, you can attach a sound
available for a short message.
] Text templates: You can use text templates already
set in the phone.
] Contacts: You can add phone numbers in the
message.
] Signature: You can attach your name card.
Write multimedia messages
Menu 5-1-2
A multimedia message can contain text, images,
and/or sound clips. This feature can be used only if it
is supported by your network operator or service
provider. Only devices that offer compatible
multimedia message or e-mail features can receive
and send multimedia messages.
1. Key in the text message. Using the right soft key,
you can input symbols, numbers and emoticons, or
use T9 input mode. After the text message input,
press the left soft key [Done].
2. Add an image and/or sound. You can move to the
next section using the up/down navigation.
50
Messages
3. You can add a slide by moving the cursor on
,
then pressing the OK key or the left soft key [Select].
You can also add a slide using the right soft key
[Menu].
4. Press the left soft key [Options]. The following
options are available.
] Send: Supports multiple numbers and email
addresses.
] Preview: Displays the multimedia message you
wish to send.
] Save: Saves the multimedia message in draft or as
a template.
] Add slide: Adds a slide before or after the current
slide.
] Move to slide: Moves the next or previous slide.
] Delete slide: Deletes the selected slide.
] Set slide format
- Swap text and picture: You can switch the
position of picture and text of the message.
] Remove media: You can remove picture or sound in
the slide. This option can be shown only when any
media file is.
] Add T9 dictionary: You can add your own word.
This menu can be shown only when the edit mode
is Predictive.
] T9 langauges: Select the language for T9 input
mode. You can also deactivate the T9 input mode by
selecting 'T9 off'.
] Exit: If you select this while writing the message,
you can exit from writing message and go back to
the previous screen. The message you have written
is not stored.
5. Press the right soft key [Insert]. You can insert
symbol, photo, Take photo, sound, and voice memo.
In addition, you can write the message by searching
the phonebook.
- Set timer: You can set the timer for slide, text,
picture and sound.
51
Messages
Inbox
Menu 5-2
Received text messages and page messages can be
searched and the contents can be viewed.
Received messages are displayed in date order.
Icon
Icon directive
Read SIM message
Unread SIM message
Read message
Unread message
Each received message has the following options
available. Press the left soft key [Options].
] Reply: Replies to the received message.
You will be alerted when you have received messages.
They will be saved in the Inbox. You can identify each
message by icons. For details, see the icon description
below.
If the phone has ‘No space for messages’, you can
make space by deleting messages, media and
applications.
] Forward: Forwards a received message to other
recipients.
Read delivery report
] Return call: Calls the sender’s phone.
Unread delivery report
] Extract: Extracts a picture, sound, text web page or
email address from the message. These will be
saved in My folder, Phonebook, or bookmarks.
n Note SIM message refers the message saved in the SIM
memory. And the network distinguishes an incoming
message into the SIM message or just message.
] Delete: Deletes the selected message from the
Inbox.
] View information: Displays information about the
received message.
52
Messages
Icon
Icon directive
Outbox
Read multimedia messages
Unread multimedia messages
You can view the list and contents of sent messages in
this menu and can also verify if the transmission was
successful.
Read notified multimedia messages
The following options are available.
Unread notified multimedia messages
Icon
Menu 5-3
Icon directive
• Reply: Replies to the sender.
Sent SIM message
• Forward: Forwards the selected message to other
recipients.
Sent message
• Return call: Call back to the sender.
• Delete: Deletes the current message.
• Extract: Extracts pictures or sounds. They will be
saved in My folder or Phonebook.
• View information: Displays information about
received messages; Sender’s address, Subject (only
for Multimedia message), Message date & time,
Message type, Message size.
] Forward: Forwards the current message to other
recipients.
] Delete: Deletes the selected message from the
Outbox.
Use this to see sent messages. For each sent
message, you can see the delivery status.
Icon
Icon directive
Sent
53
Messages
• Delete: Deletes the current message.
Listen to voice mail
• Forward: Forwards the current message to other
recipients.
This menu provides you with a quick way of accessing
your voice mailbox (if provided by your network).
Before using this feature, you must enter the voice
server number obtained from your network operator.
• View: Displays information about the outbox
messages: Subject (only for Multimedia message),
Message date & time, Message type, Message size.
Drafts
Menu 5-4
In this menu, you can see the message list saved as
draft. Scroll through the list using the up/down
navigation keys. Each draft has the following options.
] View: Views the message saved as a draft.
] Edit: Edits the message before sending.
] Delete: Deletes the current message.
] View information: Check the date, time, type, and
file size of the message.
] Delete All: Deletes all message in draft.
54
Menu 5-5
When new voice message is received, the
symbol will be displayed on the screen. Please check
with your network provider for details of their service
in order to configure the handset correctly.
Info message
Menu 5-6
Info service messages are text messages sent by the
network to mobile phone users. They provide general
information such as weather reports, traffic news,
taxis, pharmacies, and stock prices. Each type of
information is associated with a number, which can be
obtained from the network operator. When you
receive an info service message, a popup message
will indicate a new message receipt or the info
service message will be displayed directly. In standby
mode, the following options are available when
viewing info service messages.
Messages
Read
Menu 5-6-1
When you have received broadcast messages and
select Read to view the message, it will be displayed
on the screen.
Topics
Menu 5-6-2
To create new topics, press the left soft key [Option]
then select Add new. If you already have topics, you
can deactivate, edit, or delete them by using the left
soft key [Options].
Templates
Menu 5-7
There are pre-defined messages in the list. You can
view and edit the template messages or create new
messages. Two types of templates are available: Text
and Multimedia.
Text templates
• Please call me back.
Menu 5-7-1
• I’m on the way.
• Top urgent. Please contact.
• I love you.
The following options are available.
] View: Views the selected message.
] Edit: Use this to write a new message or edit the
selected template message from the text template
list.
] Write messages
- Write text message: Use this to send the selected
template message by SMS.
- Write multimedia message: Use this to send the
selected template message by MMS.
] Add new: Use this to create new template.
] Delete: Deletes the template.
] Delete all: Deletes all templates.
• I’m late. I will be there at...
• Where are you now?
55
Messages
Multimedia templates
Menu 5-7-2
] Preview: Displays the draft multimedia message.
] Save: Saves multimedia messages in draft form or
as templates.
] Add Slide: Adds a slide before or after the current
slide.
] Move to slide: Moves to next or previous slide.
] Delete slide: Deletes the highlighted slide.
] Set slide format: Sets the timer for slide, text, or to
align the message contents right, left, top and
bottom.
] Add T9 dictionary: You can add our own word. This
menu can be shown only when the edit mode is
Predictive.
] T9 languages: Selects T9 input mode.
] Exit: Exits the menu.
56
Signature
Menu 5-7-3
This option helps you to make your own name card.
Key in the name, mobile phone number, office number,
Fax number, and E-mail address.
Settings
Text message
Menu 5-8
Menu 5-8-1
] Message types:
Text, Voice, Fax, Natl. paging, X.400, E-mail, ERMES
Usually, the type of message is set to Text. You can
convert your text into alternative formats. Contact
your service provider for the availability of this
function.
] Validity period: This network service allows you to
set how long your text messages will be stored at
the message centre.
] Delivery report: If you set to Yes, you can check
whether your message is sent successfully.
Messages
] Reply via same service centre: When a message is
sent, it allows the recipients to reply and charge
the cost of the reply to your telephone bill.
] Network settings: If you select multimedia message
server, you can set URL for multimedia message
server.
] SMS centre: If you want to send the text message,
you can receive the address of SMS centre through
this menu.
] Permitted types
Personal: Personal message.
Advertisements: Commercial message.
Multimedia message
Menu 5-8-2
] Priority: You can set the priority of the message you
choose.
] Validity period: This network service allows you to
set how long your text messages will be stored at
the message centre.
] Delivery report: If it is set to Yes in this menu, you
can check whether your message is sent
successfully.
] Auto download: If you select on, you receive
multimedia messages automatically. If you select
Off, you receive only notification message in the
inbox and then you can check this notification. If
you select Home network only, you receive
multimedia messages depends on Homenetwork.
Information: Necessary information.
Voice mail centre
Menu 5-8-3
You can receive the voicemail if your network service
provider supports this feature. When a new voicemail
is arrived, the symbol will be displayed on the screen.
Please check with your network service provider for
details of their service in order to configure the phone
accordingly.
] Home: You can listen to voice mails by selecting
Home.
] Roaming: Even when you are in abroad, you can
listen to voice mails if roaming service is supported.
57
Messages
Info message
Menu 5-8-4
] Receive
Yes: If you select this menu, your phone will
receive Info service messages.
No: If you select this menu, your phone will not
receive Info service messages any more.
] Alert
Yes: Your phone will beep when you have received
Info service message numbers.
No: Your phone will not beep even though you have
received info service messages.
] Languages
You can select the language you want by pressing
[On/Off]. Then, the info service message will be
shown in the language that you selected.
Push messages
Menu 5-8-5
You can set the option whether you will receive the
message or not.
58
Camera
Menu 6
With the camera you can take pictures of people and
events while on the move.
Take picture
Menu 6-1
• To take a picture with Folder opened
1. Select Take picture, and then press
. If you
want to reach this menu directly, press for a long
time.
] Brightness [
]: Use the right/left navigation
keys to adjust lighting. 5 lighting levels are
available: -2, -1, 0, +1, +2.
] Autoshoot [
]: Allows you to select the delay
time (off, 3 Seconds and 5 Seconds). Then the
phone takes a photo after the specified time.
] Memory status [
]: Check the available memory
to take new pictures.
2. Focus on the subject to capture the image, and then
press the
key.
] Flash [
]: Allow you to set the flash when you
take a photo in dark place.
3. If you want to save it, press the left soft key
the
key.
] Resolution [
]: Allows you to set the image size
to one of Hi (640x480), Med (320x240), Low (128x160)
and phonebook (48x48).
or
n Note You can control the image size, brightness, colour
and zooming by pressing the navigation key. (
or
).
] Zoom [
]: Allows you to set the zooming value
from x1 to x5 depends on resolution.
] Picture quality [
]: Allows you to set the image
quality from Basic, Normal and Fine.
] Colour [
]: 3 settings are available: Color, Sepia,
Black/White
59
Camera
• To take a picture with Folder closed
Take in modes
You can see yourself by sub LCD, when you take your
self-portrait.
You can take a picture on the various of backgrounds.
Furthermore, you can select a frame by pressing the
navigation key (
or
).
1. Press [ ] for a long time.
2. Select Take picture highlight with side volume key
[ ], then press [ ].
3. Focus on the subject to capture the image, and then
press [ ]. This time, the picture is saved
automatically.
• Take picture: Activate the Take picture mode.
• Slide show: View the pictures in Album as slide
show.
• Torch: Activate the flash light.
• Back: Go back to the previous menu.
Menu 6-2
n Note In this mode, you can’t change the settings of
resolution.
Take continuously
Menu 6-3
You can take the maximum of 9 pictures subsequently
at the same time. After taking a picture, you can view
it by pressing the left soft key
. You can also save
it by pressing the left soft key
.
n Note If you set 320x240 in resolution, you can take only 6
pictures. In case of 128x160, it is available to 9
pictures.
Album
Menu 6-4
You can view and send a picture. In addition, you can
set the window as a background.
All pictures
You can view all pictures in order.
60
Menu 6-4-1
Camera
General pictures
Menu 6-4-2
You can view all pictures except of frame and phone
book ones.
Mode pictures
Menu 6-4-3
You can view all frame pictures.
• Options
] Multi view: You can view the maximum of 9
thumbnails in a screen.
] Write multimedia messages: You can send a
picture thru MMS.
] Protection: You can lock the picture for deleting in
mistakes in this menu.
Phonebook pictures
Menu 6-4-4
You can view all phonebook pictures.
] Set as wallpaper: You can set a picture as a
wallpaper.
] Slide show: This menu allows you to view as a
slide show automatically.
] Delete: You can delete a picture.
] Edit title: You can edit the title of picture.
] Set as wallpaper: You can set a picture as a
wallpaper.
] View information: You can view the information
about Title, Size, Date and Time you’ve taken.
] Slide show: This menu allows you to view as a
slide show automatically.
] Protection: You can lock the picture for deleting in
mistakes in this menu.
] Delete: You can delete a picture.
] Edit title: You can edit the title of picture.
] View information: You can view the information
about Title, Size, Date and Time you’ve taken.
61
Camera
Settings
Memory status
Menu 6-5
Menu 6-5-1
You can check the capacity of photo and free memory.
Clear album
Menu 6-5-2
You can delete all pictures which saved in a memory.
Auto save
Menu 6-5-3
Automatically saves the pictures taken with the
camera.
62
Settings
Menu 7
You can set the following menus for your convenience
and preferences.
1. Press
[Menu] in standby mode.
2. Press
for direct access to enter Settings.
Alarm clock
Menu 7-1
2. Select the repeat period: Once, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat,
Everyday.
Date & Time
[OK].
You can enter the current date.
Set time
Menu 7-2-3
Menu 7-2-4
Your can set the time format between 24-hour and
12-hour.
Phone settings
Menu 7-3
You can set functions relating to the phone.
[OK].
Menu 7-2
You can set functions relating to the date and time.
Set date
You can set the Date format such as DD/MM/YYYY,
MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD.
(D: Day / M: Month / Y: Year)
Time format
1. Select On and enter the alarm time you want.
4. Edit the alarm name and press
Menu 7-2-2
You can enter the current time.
You can set up to 5 alarm clocks to go off at a
specified time.
3. Select the alarm tone you want and press
Date format
Menu 7-2-1
Display settings
Menu 7-3-1
] Wallpaper: You can select the background pictures
in standby mode.
- Main LCD
- Sub LCD
63
Settings
Default
Language
You can select a picture or an animation of
wallpaper by pressing
or .
You can change the language for the display texts in
your phone. This change will also affect the Language
Input mode.
My folder
You can select a picture or an animation as
wallpaper.
] Handset scheme: You can choose 4 kind of color
schemes, Clean, Clear, Paper and Metalic style.
] Greeting note: If you select On, you can edit the
text which is displayed in standby mode.
] Backlight: You can set the light-up duration of the
display.
] Information window: You can preview the current
state of the selected menu before open the menu.
The state is shown at bottom of the display.
] Network name: If you set ON, Network name (the
name of service provider) will be appeared in
Internal LCD.
64
Call settings
Menu 7-3-2
Menu 7-4
You can set the menu relevant to a call by pressing
[Select] in the Setting menu.
Call divert
Menu 7-4-1
The Call divert service allows you to divert incoming
voice calls, fax calls, and data calls to another
number. For details, contact your service provider.
] All voice calls: Diverts voice calls unconditionally.
] If busy: Diverts voice calls when the phone is in
use.
] If no reply: Diverts voice calls which you do not
answer.
] If out of reach: Diverts voice calls when the phone
is switched off or out of coverage.
Settings
] All data calls: Diverts to a number with a PC
connection unconditionally.
• View status
View the status of the corresponding service.
] All fax calls: Diverts to a number with a fax
connection unconditionally.
Answer mode
] Cancel all: Cancels all call divert service.
] Flip open: If you select this menu, you can receive
an incoming call when only opening flip.
The submenus
Call divert menus have the submenus shown below.
• Activate
Activate the corresponding service.
To voice mail centre
Menu 7-4-2
] Press any key: If you select this menu, you can
receive a call by pressing any key except
[End] key.
] Send only: If you select this menu, you can receive
a call by only pressing
[Send] key.
Forwards to message centre. This function is not
shown at All data calls and All fax calls menus.
Send my number
To other number
] On: You can send your phone number to another
party. Your phone number will be shown on the
receiver’s phone.
Inputs the number for diverting.
(network and subscription dependent)
Menu 7-4-3
To favourite number
] Off: Your phone number will not be shown.
You can check recent 5 diverted numbers.
] Set by network: If you select this, you can send
your phone number depending on two line service
such as line 1 or line 2.
• Cancel
Deactivate the corresponding service.
65
Settings
Security settings
Call waiting
(network dependent)
Menu 7-4-4
] Activate: If you select Activate, you can accept a
waiting (receiving) call.
] Cancel: If you select Cancel, you cannot recognize
the waiting (receiving) call.
] View status: Shows the status of Call waiting.
Minute minder
Menu 7-4-5
If you select On, you can check the call duration by
deep sound every minute during a call.
Auto redial
Menu 7-4-6
] On: When this function is activated, the phone will
automatically try to redial in the case of failure to
connect a call.
] Off: Your phone will not make any attempts to redial
when the original call has not connected.
66
PIN code request
Menu 7-5
Menu 7-5-1
In this menu, you can set the phone to ask for the PIN
code of your SIM card when the phone is switched
on. If this function is activated, you’ll be requested to
enter the PIN code.
1. Select PIN code request in the security settings
menu, and then press
[Select].
2. Set On/Off.
3. If you want to change the setting, you need to enter
PIN code when you switch on the phone.
4. If you enter wrong PIN code more than 3 times, the
phone will lock out. If the PIN is blocked, you will
need to key in PUK code.
5. You can enter your PUK code up to 10 times. If you
put wrong PUK code more than 10 times, you can
not unlock your phone. You will need to contact your
service provider.
Settings
Phone lock
Menu 7-5-2
You can use security code to avoid unauthorized use
of the phone. Whenever you switch on the phone, the
phone will request security code if you set phone lock
to On. If you set phone lock to Automatic, your phone
will request security code only when you change your
SIM card.
Call barring
Menu 7-5-3
] All incoming: The barring service for all incoming
calls.
] Incoming when roaming: The barring service for all
incoming calls when roaming.
] Cancel all: You can cancel all barring services.
] Change password: You can change the password
for Call Barring Service.
The submenus:
The Call barring service prevents your phone from
making or receiving certain category of calls. This
function requires the call barring password. You can
view the following submenus.
• Activate
] All outgoing: The barring service for all outgoing
calls.
• Cancel
] International: The barring service for all outgoing
international calls.
• View status
] International when roaming: The barring service
for all international outgoing calls except home
network.
Allows to request the network to set call restriction
on.
Set the selected call restriction off.
View the status whether the calls are barred or not.
67
Settings
Fixed dial number
(SIM dependent)
Menu 7-5-4
You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone
numbers.
The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code.
] Activate: You can restrict your outgoing calls to
selected phone numbers.
] Cancel: You can cancel fixed dialling function.
] Number list: You can view the number list saved as
Fixed dial number.
Change codes
Menu 7-5-5
PIN is an abbreviation of Personal Identification
Number to prevent use by unauthorized person.
You can change the access codes: PIN2 code,
Security code.
1. If you want to change the Security code/PIN/PIN2
code input your original code, and then press
[OK].
68
2. Input new Security code/PIN/PIN2 code and verify
them.
Network settings
Menu 7-6
You can select a network which will be registered
either automatically or manually. Usually, the network
selection is set to Automatic.
Automatic
Menu 7-6-1
If you select Automatic mode, the phone will
automatically search for and select a network for you.
Once you have selected “Automatic”, the phone will
be set to “Automatic” even though the power is off
and on.
Manual
Menu 7-6-2
The phone will find the list of available networks and
show you them. Then you can select the network
which you want to use if this network has a roaming
agreement with your home network operator. The
phone let you select another network if the phone fails
to access the selected network.
Settings
Preferred
Menu 7-6-3
You can set a list of preferred networks and the phone
attempts to register with first, before attempting to
register to any other networks. This list is set from the
phone’s predefined list of known networks.
Reset settings
Menu 7-7
You can initialize all factory defaults. You need
Security code to activate this function.
GPRS settings
Menu 7-8
You can set GPRS service depending on various
situations.
69
Service
You can access various WAP (Wireless Application
Protocol) services such as banking, news, weather
reports and flight information. These services are
specially designed for mobile phones and they are
maintained by WAP service providers.
Check the availability of WAP services, pricing and
tariffs with your network operator and/or the service
provider whose service you wish to use. Service
providers will also give you instructions on how to use
their services.
Menu 8
Key
Description
Scrolls each line of the content area
Returns to the previous page
Selects options and confirms actions
Using the WAP browser menu
There are various menu options available when
surfing the Mobile Web.
Once connected, the homepage is displayed. The
content depends on the service provider. To exit the
browser at any time, press the (
) key. The phone
will return to the previous menu.
n Note The WAP browser menus may vary, depending on
your browser version.
Navigating with the WAP browser
Home
You can surf the Internet using either the phone keys
or the WAP browser menu.
Connects to a homepage. The homepage will be the
site which is defined in the activated profile. It will be
defined by the service provider if you have not defined
it in the activated profile.
Using the phone keys
When surfing the Internet, the phone keys function
differently to phone mode.
70
Internet
Menu 8-1
Menu 8-1-1
Service
Menu 8-1-2
Bookmarks
This menu allows you to store the URL of favourite
web pages for easy access at a later time. Your phone
has several pre-installed bookmarks. These
pre-installed bookmarks cannot be deleted.
To create a bookmark
1. Press the left soft key
[Options].
2. Select Add new and press the OK key.
3. After entering the desired URL and title, press the
OK key.
* Tip: Use the “
” key and
key to enter
symbols. To enter “.”, press “ ”.
After selecting a desired bookmark, the following
options are available.
] Connect: Connects to the selected bookmark.
] Add new: Select this to create a new bookmark.
] Edit: You can edit the URL and/or the title of the
selected bookmark.
Delete all: Deletes all the bookmarks.
Profiles
Menu 8-1-3
A profile is the network information used to connect to
the Internet.
Each profile has submenus as follows:
] Activate: Activates the selected profile.
] Settings: Use this to edit and change WAP settings
for the selected profile.
- Homepage: This setting allows you to enter the
address (URL) of a site you want to use as
homepage. You do not need to type http:// at the
front of each URL as the WAP Browser will
automatically add it.
- Bearer: You can set the bearer data service.
1 Data
2 GPRS
- Data settings: Appears only if you select Data
Settings as a Bearer / service.
] Delete: Deletes the selected bookmark.
71
Service
IP address: Enter the IP address of the WAP
gateway you want.
IP address: Input the IP address of the WAP
gateway you access.
Dial number: Enter the telephone number to dial
to access your WAP gateway.
APN: Input the APN of the GPRS.
User ID: The users identity for your dial-up server
(and NOT the WAP gateway).
Password: The password required by your dial-up
server (and NOT the WAP gateway) to identify
you.
Call type: Select the type of data call : Analogue
of Digital (ISDN)
Call speed: The speed of your data connection ;
9600 or 14400
Linger time: You need to enter timeout period.
After entering that, the WAP navigation service
will be unavailable if any data is not input or
transferred.
- GPRS settings: The service settings are only
available when GPRS is chosen as a bearer
service.
72
User ID: The users identify for your APN server.
Password: The password required by your APN
server.
- Connection Type: The options for connection type
are Temporary or Continuous and depend on the
gateway you are using.
Continuous
A confirmed delivery mechanism but generates
more network traffic.
Temporary
A non-confirmed (connectionless) service.
HTTP
Connecting Clients to Server directly in HTTP
- Proxy settings
IP address: Input the IP address of the Proxy
server you access.
Service
Port: Input the Proxy Port
Cache settings
- DNS settings
Primary server: Input the IP address of the
primary DNS server you access
Secondary server: Input the IP address of the
secondary DNS server you access
Menu 8-1-5
The information or services you have accessed are
saved in the cache memory of the phone.
] Clear cache: Removes all context saved in cache.
] Check cache: Set a value whether a connection
attempt is made through cache or not.
- Secure settings: According to the used gateway
port, you can choose this option as On or Off.
n Note A cache is a buffer memory, which is used to save
data temporarily.
- Display image: You can select whether images on
WAP cards are displayed or not.
Cookies settings
] Rename: You can change the profile name.
] Delete: Deletes the selected profile from the list.
] Add new: You can add a new profile.
Go to URL
Menu 8-1-4
Menu 8-1-6
The information or services you have accessed are
saved in the cache memory of the phone.
] Clear cookies: Removes all context saved in
cookie.
] Check cookies: Check whether a cookie is used or
not.
You can connect directly to the site you want. After
entering a specific URL, press the OK key.
73
Service
Security certification
Menu 8-1-7
A list of the available certification is shown.
] Authority: You can see the list of authority
certificates that have been stored in your phone.
] Personal: You can see the list of personal
certificates that have been stored in your phone.
Reset profiles
Menu 8-1-8
You can reset profiles to return to original settings.
Browser version
The WAP browser version is displayed.
74
Menu 8-1-9
SIM service
Menu 8-2
Your service provider can offer special application
through SIM card, such as home banking, stock
market, etc. If you are registered for one of these
services, the service name will appear at the end of
the Main Menu. With the SIM Services menu your
phone is future-proof and will support additions to
your service provider’s service.
For more information contact your service provider.
Downloads
Menu 9
Games & more
My games & more
Menu 9-1
Menu 9-1-1
In this menu, you can manage the Java applications
installed in your phone. You can play or delete
downloaded applications, or set the connect option.
The downloaded applications are organised in folders.
Press the left soft key
[Select] to open the
selected folder or launch the selected midlet. Using
the left soft key
[Menu], the following menus are
available.
n Note After downloading any Java game, press “Ok” Key
(
) to save it in the root folder.
] Launch: Start the selected application.
] Info: Shows the information of the application.
] Options: Some Java applications may require a
data connection to be made. 3Select this to set the
connecting options.
- Prompt: You will be asked before the application
makes the connection.
- Never: No connection is allowed.
n Note You cannot remove or rename the preinstalled folder
or a game in the folder.
JavaTM‚ is a technology developed by Sun
Microsystems. Similar to the way you would
download the Java Applet using the standard
Netscape or MS Internet Explorer browsers, Java
MIDlet can be downloaded using the WAP enabled
phone. Depending on the service provider, all Java
based programs such as Java games can be
downloaded and run on a phone. Once
downloaded, the Java program can be viewed in
the My games & more menu where you can select,
execute, or delete. The Java program files saved in
the phone are in .JAD or .JAR format.
- Always: The connection is created immediately
without a notification.
75
Downloads
n Note • The JAR file is a compressed format of the Java
program and the JAD file is a description file
that includes all detailed information. From the
network, prior to download, you can view all
detailed file descriptions from the JAD file.
• While being based on a standard language
(J2ME), not all Java applications are compatible
with all handsets on sale insofar as specific
libraries may be used for a telephone model.
The software may be blocked or switch itself on
when Java applications not specifically
developed for the phone this manual refers to
are downloaded, making it necessary to
“restart” the handset. We would like to point
out that these problems are caused by
incompatible applications and are not a product
fault.
n Caution Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition) based
programs will run in a phone environment.
The J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition) based
programs will only run in a PC environment.
Profiles
Menu 9-1-2
This menu contains the same settings of the Internet
menu. In fact, in order to download new applications,
a WAP connection is needed.
76
Pictures
The left soft key
following options.
Menu 9-2
[Options] will bring up the
] Set as wallpaper: Currently selected Picture can be
set as a Wallpaper.
] Write picture message: Downloaded Picture can be
sent via MMS.
Sounds
The left soft key
following options.
Menu 9-3
[Options] will bring up the
] Set as ringtone: This sets the Ring Tone with
currently selected Sound.
] Write messages: Melody Sound can be sent via
SMS and MMS.
Accessories
There are various accessories for your mobile phone.
You can select these options according to your
personal communication requirements.
Data cable/CD
You can connect your phone to
PC to exchange the data
between them.
Standard Battery
n Note • Always use genuine LG accessories.
• Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty.
Headset
• Accessories may be different in different regions;
please check with our regional service company or
agent for further enquires.
Allows hands-free operation.
Includes earpiece and
microphone.
Travel Adapter
This charger allows you to
charge the battery while away
from home or your office.
77
Technical Data
General
Product name: F2400
System
: GSM 900 / DCS 1800
Ambient Temperatures
Max: +55°C
Min: -10°C
78

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement